Yamaha Owner's Manual Web YG261A0 EN RX V3077 V2077 Om A

User Manual: Yamaha Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 177

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

English

CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 47
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

PREPARATIONS

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Connecting the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

PLAYBACK

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
En

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 94
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 138
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 140
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

CONFIGURATIONS

108

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

APPENDIX

148

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Accessories

Operating range of the remote control

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.

 Remote control

 Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°

30°

Insert the batteries the right
way round.

 AM antenna

 FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.

 YPAO microphone

 Microphone base
Pole
(RX-V3077 only)

• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-V3077, unless otherwise specified.
*Using for angle/height measurement during YPAO.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

 Wireless antenna

 Power cable

 CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
 Easy Setup Guide
 Safety Brochure

*The supplied power cable varies
depending on the region of purchase.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
•

indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

•

indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

Accessories

FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.80

• USB

. p.83

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.86

• Internet radio

. p.89

• AirPlay

. p.92

Supports 2- to 9-channel (plus rear presence) speaker
system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows
you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.47
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.71
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
• Enjoying compressed music with
. p.75
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
• Bi-amp connections, channel
expansion (with external power-amp)
and multi-zone configurations to
enhance your system

Control

Network contents

Speakers

iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.24

Audio

USB device

HDMI Control

3D and 4K Ultra HD signals supported
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
Audio/Video

BD/DVD player
Control

Audio/Video
(via HDMI/MHL)
Smartphone/Tablet

AV receiver (the unit)
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)

Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.68

TV remote control

. p.164

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit

Full of useful functions!

Useful tips

❑ Connecting various devices (p.38)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.35)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
HDMI Control
TV audio

Video from
external device

❑ Various wireless connection methods
(p.59)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
without router.

❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.73)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to
place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in
the front and enjoy multi-channel surround sound with the
5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).

❑ Operating external devices with the
supplied remote control (p.144)

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.107).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.125).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

You can operate external devices with the supplied
remote control by registering the remote control codes
of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD
players).

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.129).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.

❑ Low power consumption (p.137)

I want to get more bass sounds…

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption.

Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy
enhanced bass sounds (p.106).

❑ Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android™ device

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the
Yamaha website for details.

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.46).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.143). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.147).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.108)
• SCENE settings (p.110)

Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct

• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.113)
• Various function settings (p.117)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.139)
• System settings (p.141)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit

CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment
of these desires for more than 20 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

CINEMA DSP/CINEMA DSP 3D

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard
directly but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the
walls or ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is
affected by the shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken
together are what give us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual
sound fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA
DSP” allows this data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide
variety of sound programs using CINEMA DSP.

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field

By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source
such as movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of
that specific content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you
the sensation of actually being in that scene.)
In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses 3-dimensional sound field data that
includes the axis of height, generating an even more realistic sound field with a spatial
sense.

CINEMA DSP HD3

Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
Level

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

“CINEMA DSP HD³” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field playback technology that
takes full advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the
sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker output, it delivers more than
twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA
DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly natural
and powerful spatial sound field.

CINEMA DSP HD³

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit

Unrivaled audio and video quality

YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and
surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal
listening environment for maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting
various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.

YPAO-R.S.C.
In typical home, the sound
Level
has problems such as a
blurred low-frequency range
or a smearing of the
Compensation
acoustical sound image
caused by undesirable
Time
sound reflection from the
walls or ceiling.
"YPAO-R.S.C." is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces
the acoustic perfection for your listening environment.

High-resolution music enhancer
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48
kHz content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening
of the musicality in the original content (p.106)
Before processing
Loudness

YPAO

Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)

Frequency

After processing

High

YPAO Volume ON
Level

YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high
and low frequency levels at any volume level so
that you hear natural sounds even at low
volume.

Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal

Loudness

YPAO Volume

Low

YPAO Volume OFF
Frequency

Frequency

High

High-quality video processing
YPAO 3D measurement
The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers,
and the height of presence speakers as seen from the listening
position is measured, and compensation is applied to maximize
the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.

From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played
back as a high-quality image (p.127).
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit

Expandable to meet diverse needs
Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp
expansion
To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power
amp expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a
Hi-Fi amp).
For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.24).
The best expandability in Yamaha

Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.94) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
(The following shows examples of use.)
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living room, you can listen to music
through the speakers of a different room.

By connecting an external power amp, you can
enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP
- an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
(Example)
External power amp
Study room
(such as Zone2)

Living room (main zone)

Enjoying videos using a TV in another room
(HDMI connection)
While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and
music being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.

Kitchen
(such as Zone4)

Living room (main zone)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit

Part names and functions
Front panel
1

6
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.128)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.129)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.130)
• An iPod is being charged (p.80)

7
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.12).

8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.

8
Opening the front panel door
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

3 Front display
Displays information (p.13).

4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.75).

6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

■ Inside of the front panel door
9

AB C

9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.104).

B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.103).

C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.105).
Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.99).

D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.74).

E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.70).

F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.68).

ZONE CONTROL

G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2–4

Enables/disables the audio output to
each zone (p.98).
Changes the zone that is controlled by
the keys and knobs on the front panel
(p.98).

O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.40, 41) or a smartphone (p.41).

H INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display
(p.103).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.61).

I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.77).

J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.76).

K PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.77).

L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.76).

M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.83) or an iPod
(p.80).

N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.47).

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

Front display (indicators)

123

ECO

MUTE VOLUME

ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP
3
4
IN OUT 1 2 3 2
ENHANCER
PARTY
STEREO TUNED
HD 3

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.

2 ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.137).

3 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.59).

4 ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.98).

5 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

6 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.103).
Blinks when audio is muted.

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

C D

1 HDMI

7 MUTE

ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL

9 VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.71) or
the virtual surround processing (p.73) is working.

0 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.75) is
working.

A STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.

B CINEMA DSP indicator
(RX-V3077)
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.71) is
working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP
HD³ is activated.
(RX-V2077)
“CINEMA DSP” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.71) is
working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D
is activated.

(RX-V3077)

D Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

E ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.105) is working.

F Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)
N Front presence speaker (R)
M Rear presence speaker (L)
< Rear presence speaker (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)

C PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.99)

8 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

Rear panel
1 2

A B

D
(RX-V3077)

* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.

1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.39).

2 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.

3 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.38).

4 HDMI OUT 1 jack

5 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.44).

6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(component/composite video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component or
composite video and outputting video signals (p.36) or for
connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3
(p.96).

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.35). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack

8 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.37), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.96).

For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.38).
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.38).

9 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.45).

0 REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.97).

A NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.43).

B RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.

C WIRELESS jack
For connecting the supplied wireless antenna (p.43).

D AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.45).

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

(RX-V3077)

* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.

E F
E ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.42).

F AUDIO 1–4 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.39).

G MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel
output and inputting audio signals (p.44).

H ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-V3077)
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.95), or for connecting to an
external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence
channels (p.33).

ZONE OUT jacks (RX-V2077)

I SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.18).

J PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.22) or
to an external power amplifier (p.33).

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.95).

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 SOURCE z key

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE key
Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.145).
This key lights up in green after pressed.

RECEIVER key

Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.145). This key
lights up in orange after pressed.

RECEIVER z key

4
5
6
7
8

G
H

I
J
K

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1–7
AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks
PHONO
PHONO jacks
MULTI
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
USB
USB jack (on the front panel)
NET
NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select
a desired network source)
TUNER
FM/AM radio

4 ZONE switch

L
:
A

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control
(p.98).

5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.68).

B
C
D
E

6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.70).

7 External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.145).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.82).

A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.76).
BAND
Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET
Select a preset station.
TUNING
Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is
selected (p.145).

B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.70).

C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.103).

D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.77).

F TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.144).

G HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.67).

H PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.99).

I VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.

J MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.

K OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.104).

L DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.103).

M CODE SET key
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.144).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.144).

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers (p.18)

Basic speaker configuration (p.19)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.
Advanced speaker configuration (p.24)
Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.35)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.38)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.42)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Connecting a network cable or the
wireless antenna (p.43)

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the supplied wireless antenna
for establishing a wireless network connection.

6 Connecting other devices (p.44)

Connect external devices such as recording devices.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.45)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.46)

Select the desired on-screen menu language.

Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.47)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).

Connecting to a network device wirelessly
(p.59)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless
connection.

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

PREPARATIONS

➤ General setup procedure

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.24).
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.22).

Ideal speaker layout

Functions of each speaker
Speaker type

Abbr.

Function

Front (L)

Front (R)

Center

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and
vocals).

Surround (L)

Surround (R)

Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers
also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround
back speakers are connected.

Surround back (L)

Surround back (R)

Front presence (L)

Front presence (R)

Rear presence (L)

Rear presence (R)

Subwoofer

0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA
DSP HD³ (RX-V3077) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-V2077) (p.71), the
presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in
your room.

5
10°~30°

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

10°~30°

T
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

• (RX-V3077 only)
The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

❑ 9.2+2-channel system (using both surround back and rear presence speakers)
E

R
1

2
3

R
1

Y
6

❑ 9.2-channel system (using rear presence speakers)

2
3

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected sound program (p.71).

• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling, set “Layout (Front
Presence/Rear Presence)” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu to “Overhead” after connecting the power cable to
an AC wall outlet.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ 9.2-channel system (using surround back speakers)
E

❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

R
1

2
3

5
6

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds
using the surround back speakers.

• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling, set “Layout (Front Presence)” (p.123) in the
“Setup” menu to “Overhead” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• (RX-V3077 only)
This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows
you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ 5.1-channel system

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for
enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)

❑ 2.1-channel system

Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Setting the speaker impedance

■ Connecting speakers

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a
6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case,
you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the
speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Speakers to be connected

STRAIGHT
Room

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
SPIMP.-

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

4
5

SPEAKERIMP.
8MIN

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

Main zone

Speaker type

Speaker system
(the number of channels)

Abbr.

9+2

Front (L)

●

Front (R)

●

Center

●

Surround (L)

●

*5

Surround (R)

●

*5

Surround back (L)

●

*1

*3

Surround back (R)

●

*1

*3

Front presence (L)

●

*4

*6

Front presence (R)

●

*4

*6

Rear presence (L)

●

*2

Rear presence (R)

●

*2

Power Amp
Assign
(p.120)

Basic (default)

If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear
presence speakers (*2). If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back
speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). If you have five speakers, use two of
them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers (*6).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to
an AC wall outlet.
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.33).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.

+
–

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.

Connection diagram

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
AUDIO 3

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIO 4

CENTER

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

d Tighten the terminal.

The unit (rear)
FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

SUR. BACK

FRONT

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

SPEAKERS

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP

EXTRA SP1

+ (red)

FR
ON

SINGLE

– (black)

Using a banana plug
(Australia model only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
E

R
1

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

Banana plug
9

FR
ON

b
4

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
T

Audio pin cable
6

PRE
OUT

(SING

LE)

(FR
ONT)
1

2
SURR
UND

SUR.
BACK

(RE

SUBW AR)
OOFE
R
CENT

CENT

FRO
NT

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.19), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds

Bi-amp connection

Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,
multi-channel amplifier, etc.) to
build an extended system

Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room

Power-amp channel expansion

(Example)

Multi-zone configuration
(Example)
External power
amplifier

Bi-amp
connection

Zone2

Main zone

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Available speaker configurations
(RX-V3077)
Main zone
Speaker configuration

Output channel
(max)

Bi-amp

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone



Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers



Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and power-amp channel
expansion (for presence channels)

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front and/or presence
channels)

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and
multi-zone speakers



External power
amplifier (required)

Power Amp Assign (p.120)

Page

7ch BI-AMP

+1 room

7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP

Front presence
Rear presence

Rear Presence

9ch +RP

Front

9ch +FRONT

Front presence
Rear presence

7ch +FP+RP

Front

+1 room

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

Front

+2 rooms

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

+1 room

7ch +1ZONE

+1 room

9ch +1ZONE

+2 rooms

7ch +2ZONE

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign (p.120)

Page

7ch BI-AMP

+1 room

7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

26
29

7
Using multi-zone speakers

Multi-zone

(RX-V2077)
Main zone
Speaker configuration

Output channel
(max)

Bi-amp

External power
amplifier (required)

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone



Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers



Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and
multi-zone speakers

Front

+1 room

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

Front

+2 rooms

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

+1 room

7ch +1ZONE

+1 room

9ch +1ZONE

+2 rooms

7ch +2ZONE

7
Using multi-zone speakers

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.120)
in the “Setup” menu.
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the
EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to
the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks. The following explanation is based
on the assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ 7ch BI-AMP

❑ 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE
Bi-amp

Bi-amp

2
3

5
6

Zone3

Main zone

Speaker

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.98), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (RX-V3077 only)

❑ 9ch +RP (RX-V3077 only)

Bi-amp

R
1

2
3

Speaker

Y
6

2
3

T
via
external amp

E
via external amp

via external amp

T
via
external amp

via
external amp

Connect to

Y
6

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

EXTRA SP 1

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1–2

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting
external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.95).

via
external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an
external amplifier for Zone3 (p.95).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ 9ch +FRONT (RX-V3077 only)

❑ 7ch +FP+RP (RX-V3077 only)

via external amp

R
via external amp

via external amp

2
3

Speaker

Y
6

T
via
external amp

Connect to

Y
6

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

EXTRA SP 2

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1–2

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an
external amplifier for Zone3 (p.95).

via
external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting
external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.95).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

❑ 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

via external amp

R
1

1
9

5
6

2
9

5
6

Zone2

7
1

Zone3

Main zone

Zone3

Speaker

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ 7ch +1ZONE

❑ 9ch +1ZONE

E
1
9

5
6

7
Zone3

Zone2

Main zone

Speaker

5
6

Main zone

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

EXTRA SP 1

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.98), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ 7ch +2ZONE

1
9

2
9

5
6

Zone2

7
1

Main zone
Zone3

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.98), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals.

When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.120) in the
“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

To utilize the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.120) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC
wall outlet.
The unit (rear)

The unit (rear)

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP

EXTRA SP1

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE
SINGLE

2
4

3
9

Zone2

5
Main zone
1

Zone3
• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals output the same signals.

Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.

• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign”
(p.120) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is
assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks.
• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.95).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Connecting an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the
input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel
signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.

(Example)
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
NETWORK
AV 6

(3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

Main input jack

AC IN

Caution

RS-232C

REMOTE
1

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.

OUT

PRE OUT

OUT

(FRONT)

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

MAIN IN

(SINGLE)

3/
NCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS

E 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of
the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to
the pre-main amplifier.

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP

FRONT

EXTRA SP1

Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)

SUR

The unit (rear)
HDMI
3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

(3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

AC IN
MPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

RS-232C

REMOTE
IN

OUT

2
C
AV 3

PB
PR
MULTI CH INPUT

12V

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

CENTER

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

1 23 45

The unit (rear)

1 F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-V3077 only)
Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power
Amp Assign” setting (p.120).

2 R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-V3077 only)
Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power
Amp Assign” setting (p.120).

3 FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.

About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• With unbalanced inputs
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 )

4 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.

5 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect
the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

6 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks

■ Video jacks

■ Audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.

Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.

AV 1

HDMI cable

Digital optical cable
EN

PON

COM

Component video cable

AV 1

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

❑ VIDEO jacks
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
features.

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
AV 1

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
Digital coaxial cable

Video pin cable

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.

❑ HDMI/MHL jack
Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL
or HDMI cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).

MHL or HDMI cable
Stereo pin cable

• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both
MHL and HDMI connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on
your MHL-compatible mobile device. For details on an MHL
connection, see “MHL connection” (p.41). When connecting an
HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an
HDMI cable.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Input/output jacks and cables

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.164).

To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

■ HDMI connection

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.37).

HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT
2

The unit
(rear)

(ZONE OUT)

1
ARC

HDMI

HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI

AUDIO

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

L
L

5 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Component/composite video connection

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
The unit (rear)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT
2

(ZONE OUT)

PHONO

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 1

AV 4

AV OUT

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

VIDEO
Y

GND

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

Video input (composite video)

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AUDIO 1

A
Y
PB
PR
AV 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

5 OPTICAL

6 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

AUDIO

AUDIO 1
1 COAXIAL

2 COAXIAL

3 OPTICAL

4 OPTICAL

(2 TV)

SURROUN

ANTENNA

(4 RADIO)

• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.

75Ω

TV
5 OPTICAL

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

OPTICAL
O

The unit
(rear)

MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks

HDMI
AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

AV OUT

AV 6

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

AV 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR
PB

REMOTE
IN

OUT

AUDIO 1

5 OPTICAL

6 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

Video input
(component video)

OUT

PB
PR
AV 3
MULTI CH INPUT

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

TRIGGER
OUT

A
Y
PB
PR Y
AV 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

12V

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

CENTER

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

COMPONENT VIDEO
FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

AUDIO

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

SINGLE

5 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

HDMI

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.67).

The unit
(rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI OUT
2
(ZONE OUT)

1
ARC

HDMI

HDMI input

HDMI

Projector
TV (already connected)

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor
(p.96).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3 Connecting playback devices
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
• Connecting an iPod (p.80)

■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.83)
Output jacks on video device

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

Input jacks on the unit
Video

Audio

Component video

AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

AV 1–3
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.162).
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.134) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),
COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

Digital coaxial

The unit (rear)

PR
PB

DC OUT
5V 0.5A

(ZONE OUT)

PHONO

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

HDMI

HDMI OUT
2

AV 3

AV 1

AV OUT

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 4

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

Video output
(component video)

GND

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.107) in the “Option” menu.

AUDIO 1

A
Y
PB
PR Y
AV 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

5 OPTICAL

6 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

C
AV 3

PB
PR
MULTI CH INPUT

12V

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

CENTER

ZONE OUT

■ HDMI connection

PR
1 COAXIAL

2 COAXIAL

3 OPTICAL

4 OPTICAL

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

ZONE 2/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE

SURROUND BACK

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

The unit (rear)

C
SINGLE

COAXIAL
HDMI
1

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

(2 TV)

A
Y
PB
PR Y
AV 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

OUT

HDMI output

C
AV 3

PB
PR
MULTI CH INPUT

12V

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT

SUR. BACK

(REAR
SUBWOOF

HDMI
5 OPTICAL

FRONT

6 COAXIAL

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

HDMI

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

CENTER

OPTICAL

REMOTE
IN

AUDIO 1

Video device

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

HDMI

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

SINGLE

Video device

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Composite video connection

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.

Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video

Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.134) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL
(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

The unit (rear)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A

HDMI OUT
2
(ZONE OUT)

PHONO

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks

AV 4

AV OUT

Video output
(composite video)

GND

V
L

Audio output jacks on audio device

Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO)

PHONO

VIDEO

1 COAXIAL

2 COAXIAL

3 OPTICAL

4 OPTICAL

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

C
COAXIAL

Video device

L
L

OPTICAL

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

PHONO jacks
PHONO

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Audio output
(PHONO)
Ground lead

GND

The unit
(rear)

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.

PHONO
L

DC OUT
5V 0.5A

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

HDMI OUT
2

(ZONE OUT)

R
PHONO

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.80) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.83).

GND

AV 2

AV 3

AV OUT

AV 2

AV 3

(1 BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

❑ HDMI connection

L
AV 1

ARC

AV 4

R
PB

Turntable

COM

GND

AUDIO 1

A
Y
PB
PR Y
AV 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

5 OPTICAL

6 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.

1 COAXIAL

2 COAXIAL

3 OPTICAL

4 OPTICAL

FRONT

SURROUND

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

HDMI

75Ω

C
COAXIAL

Audio device

The unit (front)

L
L

OPTICAL

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

Game console

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

Camcorder

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.35).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from
the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in
“Video Out” (p.107) in the “Option” menu.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ MHL connection

❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection

Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an
MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the
mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input
videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.

MHL

The unit (front)

MHL output
MHL

Game console

Mobile device

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.
Camcorder
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.35).
• You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.

• If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.

• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and
numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the
mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack.

• If “Standby Through” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio
to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby
mode.
• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.
– The unit is turned on.
– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Assembling the AM antenna

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
• The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.

FM antenna
AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna
Hold down

The unit (rear)

Insert

Release

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the
supplied wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

Connecting the wireless antenna

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Connect the supplied wireless antenna to the unit for establishing a wireless network
connection.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.59).

Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
Internet

Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
WAN

ESS
WIREL

LAN

Modem
PC

a Rotate the antenna clockwise.

Network cable

b Stand the antenna up straight.
The unit (rear)

Router
NETWORK
AV 6

(3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

AC IN

Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)

RS-232C

REMOTE
1

OUT

• Do not connect the antenna other than the supplied one.
• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

OUT

• When packing the unit, remove the antenna to prevent damage.
T

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.130).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.139) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6 Connecting other devices
Connecting recording devices

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output video/audio signals selected as the input.

You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
The unit (rear)

• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks.

HDMI

HDMI OUT
2

(ZONE OUT)

AV 3

AV 1

AV OUT

• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGE
OUT

AV OUT jacks
AV OUT

Video/audio input

3 OPTICAL

HDMI OUT
2

AV 1

AV 2

6 COAXIAL

AV 3

AV 4

AV OUT

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

PB
PR
MULTI CH INPUT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

12V

0.1AMAX. T

CENTER

ZON

ZON
SUBWOOFER F. PRES

SURROUND BACK

MULTI CH INPUT
ANTENNA

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

C
AV 3

FRONT
SURROUND

VIDEO

AV 2

Channel output
(Center)

CENTER

(4 RADIO)

(1 BD/DVD)

4 OPTICAL

(ZONE OUT)

PHONO

5 OPTICAL

(2 TV)

The unit (rear)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A

AUDIO 1

A
Y
PB
PR Y
AV 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

75Ω

V
SINGLE

GND

(Subwoofer)

AUDIO
AUDIO 1

A
Y
PB
PR
AV 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

5 OPTICAL

6 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

L
L

1 COAXIAL

2 COAXIAL

3 OPTICAL

4 OPTICAL

R
R

SURROU

ANTENNA
FM

FRONT

MULTI CH
INPUT jacks

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

(Surround
back)

(4 RADIO)

Video/audio
recording device

75Ω

OPTICAL
O

(Surround)

Device with analog
multi-channel output

O
R

(Front)

If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.107) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.
TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks

The unit
(rear)

Power amplifier
(such as MX-A5000)

NETWORK

(3 NET )

WIRELESS

RS-232C

NETWORK
AV 5

AV 6

(3 NET )

AV 7

To an AC wall outlet

TRIGGER
OUT

The unit
(rear)

AC IN

AV 4

AV 2

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.

TRIGGER
OUT

HDMI
V3

OMPONENT VIDEO

Trigger In
(+12V)

7 Connecting the power cable

LE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

RS-232C

REMOTE
IN

OUT

2
C
AV 3

PB
PR
MULTI CH INPUT

12V

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

CENTER

12V

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP

EXTRA SP1

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

SINGLE

System
connection
input

Yamaha
subwoofer

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.135) in the
“Setup” menu.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RECEIVER z

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.

ON SCREEN

1
2

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.

6
7

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

Cursor keys
ENTER

PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RECEIVER z

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.

According to your speaker configuration, configure
the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.120) in the
“Setup” menu.
For the basic speaker configuration (p.19): set to “Basic”
(default).
For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.24): set
to the appropriate setting.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.

5
• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
– Do not connect headphones.

1
2
3

• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

YPAO MIC
jack

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

The unit (front)

YPAO MIC

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
VOLUME

CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT

E
1

MAX

MIN

9
4

MIN

YPAO
5
microphone

MAX

Ear height

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ Multi Position

The following screen appears on the TV.
RECEIVER

Selects multi measure or single measure.

Settings

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.

6
Cursor keys
ENTER

If desired, select the measuring options.

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions
in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to
suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.48) or
“Angle/Height” (p.49) (RX-V3077 only) and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate
external devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor
keys.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.53)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.50)

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Single measure

Multi measure
(5 listening positions)

❑ Angle/Height
(RX-V3077 only)
Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.

e
bac

Settings
Multi measure
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back)

b
c a e
d

Yes

Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will measure angle of
each speaker and height of the presence speakers at the listening
position, and correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP can
create more effective sound fields.

No (default)

Disables the angle/height measurement.

c
a b
d

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)

(RX-V3077 [when angle/height measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 2.

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the
measurement.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.57) or “Warning messages” (p.58).
• (RX-V3077 only)
Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the
TV.

1
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.

Perform the angle/height measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
(RX-V2077)
(RX-V3077 [when angle/height measurement is disabled])

Microphone base

Proceed to Step 3.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

c Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.

Microphone base

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

ENTER

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.

d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.55).

e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
Cursor keys
ENTER

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.105) in the
“Option” menu.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.

When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
(RX-V2077)

(RX-V3077 [when angle/height measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 5.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.

(RX-V3077 [when angle/height measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 4.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

Perform the angle/height measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.

Microphone base

Cursor keys
ENTER

c Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the
position “1”.

Microphone base

f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.55).

To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.

Cursor keys
ENTER

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.117) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

The following screen appears.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

3
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Wiring

Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.

Distance

Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level

Output level adjustment for each speaker

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.116).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload‘” and
press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

(RX-V3077 only)
Angle
(Horizontal) Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening
position

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Height

(RX-V3077 only)
Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position

To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message

Cause

Remedy

E-1: No Front SP

Front speakers are not detected.

E-2: No Sur. SP

One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP

One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL

A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC

The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.

E-8: No Signal

The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.

E-9: User Cancel

The measurement has been canceled.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-11: No R.PRNS SP

One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message

Cause

Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.56) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.55) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m
(80 ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.

Select “Level” in “Result” (p.56) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend
using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.

■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.

Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
Internet

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)

The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.65).

Wireless router

• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.43) or the
wireless network connection (p.60).

Modem

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Internet radio
– Network services
– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit

• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.60).

• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.43) or Wireless Direct (p.65).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RECEIVER z

Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPad/iPod touch)?

Yes

A (p.60)

Does your wireless router
(access point) has a WPS
button?

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

5
6

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

Yes

B (p.61)

ON SCREEN

No
Cursor keys
ENTER

C (p.62)
■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

• You need iOS device with iOS 5.0 or later. For details on supported devices, see
“Supported devices and file formats” (p.161).

1
2

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RECEIVER z

Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
The unit (front)

■ B: Using the WPS push button
configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.

• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

1
2
ON SCREEN

10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
11 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.

press ENTER.

Cursor keys
ENTER

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RECEIVER z

■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.

1
2

Cursor keys
ENTER

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

5
6

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
ON SCREEN

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the
WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow
the instructions displayed on the TV screen.

Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.60).

Access Point
Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by
searching for an access point. For details on
settings, see “Searching for an access point”
(p.63).

Manual Setting

You can setup a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.63).

PIN Code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point). The method is available if the
wireless router (access point) supports the WPS
PIN code method. For details on settings, see
“Using the PIN code” (p.64).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ Searching for an access point

❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES),
Mixed Mode

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.

❑ Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.

If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).

ON SCREEN

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

Cursor keys
ENTER

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RECEIVER z

Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.

• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.

1
2
ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

5
6

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

Settings
None, WEP

• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.
Otherwise, enter either 5 or 13 character string.

11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.

12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.

The settings made appear on the TV screen.

The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly

PLAYBACK
Input selection keys

Basic playback procedure

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.

Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.

HDMI OUT
MUTE

VOLUME

ON SCREEN

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

HDMIOUTSel.
OUT1+2

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.

Cursor keys
ENTER

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.76)
• Playing back iPod music (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.83)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.86)

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
Off

Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.68).

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.92)

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.134), you can turn on/off
each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

• Listening to Internet radio (p.89)

OUT 1+2

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.105).

On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.

PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

1
SCENE

Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
SCENE (SCENE key)
ON SCREEN

1 (BD/DVD)

2 (TV)

3 (NET)

4 (RADIO)

Input (p.67)

AV 1

AUDIO 1

NET RADIO

TUNER

Audio Select (p.107)

Auto

—

HDMI Output (p.67)

OUT 1+2

Sound Program (p.70)

Sci-Fi

STRAIGHT

9ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.126)

Auto

Enhancer (p.75)

Off

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.106)

Input
Cursor keys
ENTER

HDMI Output

Mode

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.110).

On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SOURCE

Configuring scene assignments

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.

Input selection keys

SCENE
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

SCENE1
SETComplete

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.

Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.111) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound

Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,
Extra Bass

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround

Video

Video Mode, Video Adjustment

Volume

Master Volume

Lipsync

Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.145) to register it.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.111) in the “Scene” menu.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.71).
PROGRAM

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.112).

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.72).

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.13) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.138).

❑ Selecting a surround decoder
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.74).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.74).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.75).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.75).

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D)

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER
* CINEMA DSP HD³: RX-V3077, CINEMA DSP 3D: RX-V2077

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound
fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural
stereoscopic sound fields.
Sound program category

MUSIC

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

CLASSICAL
HallinVienna

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” (RX-V3077) or “CINEMA DSP n” (RX-V2077) lights up

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• When Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
• (RX-V3077 only)
The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the
reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as
providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage.
The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall
effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will
not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

Church in
Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
outskirts of Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

❑ LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

❑ STEREO
2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

9ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.21) and enjoy multi-channel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)

• CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D (p.71) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.73) do not work when “2ch
Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.

■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.158).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

Press STRAIGHT.

HD 3

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.

STRAIGHT

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

SUR.DECODE
ProLogic

bPro Logic
bPLIIx Movie
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music

SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)

bPLII Music

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu to
a setting other than “Off”.

bPLIIx Game

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.73) works when multi-channel source is played back.

bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

PUREDIRECT

HD 3

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Output from the AV OUT jacks
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
PURE DIRECT

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.106) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).

Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT
1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER
SLEEP

EnhancerOn

HD 3

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

“ENHANCER” lights up

ENHANCER

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.106) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

Listening to FM/AM radio
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.

TUNER

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP

FM87.50MHz

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

HD 3

Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.

BAND

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

TUNING
DOCK
TAG
HD
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
HD 3

Numeric keys

FM98.50MHz

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.107) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.

TUNER

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.79).

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

PRESET

■ Selecting a preset station

Preset

DOCK
TAG
HD
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
HD 3

01:FM98.50MHz

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.76)
to tune into the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.79).

Preset number
Numeric keys
MEMORY

DOCK
TAG
HD

Preset

PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
STEREOSLEEP
TUNED
HD 3

01:FM98.50MHz
PresetOK

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

Preset

DOCK
TAG
HD
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
HD 3

02:Empty
FM98.50MHz

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.

1
TUNER

Submenu
Tuning (+/-)

Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-)

Selects a radio station automatically.

Memory

Registers the selected station as
presets.

Direct

Enters a frequency directly.

Manual Tuning

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen
1

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.

2
4
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.

2 Band icon
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.

3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

4 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio

■ Browse screen
1
3
2
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu

Submenu

Function

Memory

Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the
list.

Clear All Preset

Clear all the preset stations.

Utility

1 Page Up
1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio

Playing back iPod music
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.

Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.

USB

• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.161).

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Connecting an iPod

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

1
2

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
The unit (front)

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

DOCK
TAG
HD

IN OUT 1 OUT 2

PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP

HD 3

USB
Connected

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.82).

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music

■ Browse screen

■ Playback screen

1
2
3

5
4
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.82) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

3 Contents list

External device
operation keys

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.82) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

2 List name
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

1 Status indicators

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu

Function

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

Play Control

10 Pages Down

Submenu

Function

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

f
g

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.

• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

Operational remote control
Function
keys
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

External device
operation keys
MODE

Cursor keys

Select an item.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

ENTER

Confirms the selection.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

RETURN

Returns to the previous screen.
a

External device
operation keys

Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.

Stops playback.

f
g
h
j

Skips forward/backward.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
Repeat
(Repeat)

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums
(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
USB

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this
case, use the wired network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.161).

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)

IN OUT 1 OUT 2

PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP

HD 3

USB
Connected

Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

USB storage device

DOCK
TAG
HD

• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

■ Browse screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.

1
2
3

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

5
4
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.85) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

2 List name
3 Contents list
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

■ Playback screen

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.

1
2
3

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

1 Status indicators
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.85) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

2 Playback information
OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
External device
operation keys

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

Item

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu

Play Control

Submenu

Function

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Repeat
(Repeat)

f
g

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.43). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.139) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.161).

❑ For Windows Media Player 11

1
2
3

Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

Click “OK” to exit.

Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.

Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
❑ For Windows Media Player 12

1
2
3
4

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Click “OK” to exit.

• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
NET

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.

■ Browse screen
1
2
3

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

5
4
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.88) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

2 List name
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.

3 Contents list

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.

4 Item number/total

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

■ Playback screen

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.

1
2
3

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

1 Status indicators
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.88) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information
OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
External device
operation keys

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Play Control

Submenu

Function

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Repeat
(Repeat)

f
g

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

3 Operation menu

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.109).

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

NET

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.43). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.139) in the “Information” menu.

Playback of Internet radio

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

PLAYBACK ➤

Listening to Internet radio

■ Browse screen

■ Playback screen

1
2
3

5
4
1 Playback indicator

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
External device
operation keys

4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)

Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.91).

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu

Submenu

Adds the current station to the
“Bookmarks” folder (p.91).

Bookmark On
Play Control

Function

Stops playback.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

PLAYBACK ➤

Listening to Internet radio

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.

■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen

Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.

Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
You can switch the language.

The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.

Cursor keys
ENTER

Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.

■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website

Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.

Check the vTuner ID of the unit.

• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.

• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in
the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station
name.

You can find the vTuner ID (MAC address of the unit) in
“Network” (p.139) in the “Information” menu.

PLAYBACK ➤

Listening to Internet radio

Playing back music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
iTunes

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

1
Router
The unit

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon (
iTunes (example)

(wired or wireless)

) appears.

iPod (example)

iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.139) in the “Information” menu.

• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
iTunes (example)

iPod (example)

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.161).

Network name of the unit

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

PLAYBACK ➤

Playing back music with AirPlay

Menu
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu.

Play Control

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.109) in the “Input”
menu to “Off”.

Submenu

Function

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback temporarily.

f
g

Skips forward/backward.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.

Screen Off

Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
External device
operation keys

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.

■ Playback screen
1
2

iTunes (example of English version)

1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

Check this box

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.

PLAYBACK ➤

Playing back music with AirPlay

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).

■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person
can listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the
guest room (Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.

Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI)

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in
each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.163).
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that
you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone
connections that best meet your requirements.

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Multi-zone configuration examples

Guest room
(Zone2 or Zone3)

■ Enjoying music in other rooms

Living room (main zone)

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.96
TV (for digital video playback): p.96
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.95
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Video/audio (HDMI)

Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.95

Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)

Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.96

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

Preparing the multi zone system

❑ Using an external amplifier

Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.

Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin
cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.

Caution

The unit (rear)

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.

HDMI
AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks

AV 7

VD)

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE
IN

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

OUT

2
A
AV 1

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

COMPONENT VIDEO

PB
PR Y
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

AV 3

PB
PR
MULTI CH INPUT

12V

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

CENTER

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

L
R

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(
SU

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method
varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTE

ZONE 2 /
F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /
R.PRESENSE

External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)

SINGLE

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For
details, see “Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.32).

R
AUDIO

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

• (RX-V3077 only)
You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front
presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an
external amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence
channel audio.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or Zone3. Depending on the
video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection
methods.

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at
Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multi-channel playback
in another room (Zone4).

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for multi-zone video output. To watch
videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to
the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD
player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to
the unit with an HDMI cable (p.38).

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu
is set to “Zone2”.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone4.

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack

The unit (rear)
1

AV 1

AV OUT

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

HDMI

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI
PB

HDMI input

HDMI OUT
2

(1 BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

(Example: using a TV)

The unit (rear)
HDMI

ARC

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

HDMI

TRIGGER
OUT

1
IN

Video input
(component video or
composite video)

2
A

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

Y
PB
PR Y
AV 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
5 OPTICAL

AV 3

Y
FRONT

6 COAXIAL
R

PB
PR
MULTI CH INPUT

SURROUND

12V

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

CENTER

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/Z

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y
SINGLE

ZONE OUT jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)

VIDEO

Zone2 or Zone4

(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI

Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
Main zone

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor for Zone2 or
Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.

Zone4

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output
from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.32).
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.

■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the
supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT 1 or REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for
each device before using (p.144).

REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks

The unit (rear)
HDMI
AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 6

AV 7

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE
IN

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PB
PR Y
DIO 3
AUDIO 4

AV 3

FRONT

PB
PR
MULTI CH INPUT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

12V

OUT

0.1AMAX. TOTAL

CENTER

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
SUBWOOFER F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFE

FRONT

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

SINGLE

Infrared signal
transmitter

Infrared
signal
receiver

External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Main zone

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Remote connections between Yamaha products
RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using
Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit
does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE

ZONE

1
2

REMOTE

OUT

When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding
zone indicator lights up in the front display.

Infrared signal
receiver

Press RECEIVER z.
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled
or disabled.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

OUT

Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.

Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)

Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,
see “Multi-zone output” (p.163).

Remote control

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.76)
• Playing back iPod music (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.83)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.86)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.89)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.92)

• You can also use the web control (p.100) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is
ongoing in the main zone.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4.

PARTY
SCENE

■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4

The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same
music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party
mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.
Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as
background music for a house party.

The following functions are also available when the zone you want
to operate is enabled.

Press VOLUME or MUTE.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

MUTE

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.

Press SCENE.

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)

• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode
Set” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu.

• Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main
zone.

Setting the sleep timer

SLEEP

Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.

Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
VOLUME

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB

Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
Web browser

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.139) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.102) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.

Web control

• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.131), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.

Web control

• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.

Router

The unit

– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.102) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 6.x

1
2

Start the web browser.
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)

PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

100

■ Top menu screen

■ Control screen
3

6
2
3
4

1 CONTROL
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

2 STATUS
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

3 SETTINGS
Moves to the settings screen.

4 PARTY MODE
Turns on/off the party mode (p.99).

5 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on/off the power for all zones.

6 MAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.

1 PLAY INFO
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

2 TOP MENU
Moves to the top menu screen.

3 SCENE
Selects a scene for the selected zone.

4 POWER
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

5 VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.

6 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings.

PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

101

■ Settings screen

Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

1 Rename
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.131) or the name of each zone
(p.132). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Network
Selects the network connection method (p.130) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.130). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.131) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.130).

Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.

2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.

3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

102

Viewing the current status
Switching information on the front display

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
DOCK
TAG
HD

IN OUT 1 OUT 2

PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP

HD 3

Info
AudioDecoder

Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Item name

Input source/
Party mode
status

Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status

Audio format/
Decoder

Sound
mode

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
DOCK
TAG
HD

IN OUT 1 OUT 2

DISPLAY

PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP

HD 3

AV1
ProLogic

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

CINEMA DSP status

Information

INFO

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

Input source group

Item

AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)

TUNER

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)

USB
SERVER
AirPlay

NET RADIO

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status

103

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

DOCK
TAG
HD

IN OUT 1 OUT 2

PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP

HD 3

Option
ToneControl

• Default settings are underlined.
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Front display

Item

Function

Tone Control
(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and
low-frequency range of sounds.

105

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume.

105

Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from
maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume is adjusted.

105

Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.

106

Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue
sounds.

106

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

106

Enables/disables Extra Bass.

106

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music
Enhancer.

106

Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital
audio).

106

Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

107

Selects a video adjustment setting from
presets.

107

Input Trim
(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input
sources.

107

Audio Select
(A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more
than one audio connection is made for one
input source.

107

Video Out
(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio
input source.

107

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)

Dialogue
(Dialog)

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

3
4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Video Mode
Video Processing (V.M)
(Video Process.)
Video Adjustment
(Video Adjust)

Input Settings
(Input Settings)

Page

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

104

Item

Function

FM Mode
(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM
radio reception.

Page

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod
(p.82), USB storage device (p.85), or media
server (p.88).

—

Repeat
(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod
(p.82), USB storage device (p.85), or media
server (p.88).

—

107

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
Settings

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Off (Off)

Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On)

Enables YPAO Volume.

• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.47).

Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments

• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
Off (Off)

The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is
enabled.

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.

On
Off
Input level

Volume: high
Output level

Output level

Volume: low

On
Off
Input level

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

105

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0 to 3

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.

Settings
Off (Off)

Disables Extra Bass.

On (On)

Enables Extra Bass.

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.75).

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front
presence speakers are used.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.71) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.75).

Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Settings

Ideal position

Off (Off)

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On)

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings

On (On)

Enables the high-resolution mode.
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio
signal processing condition.)

Off (Off)

Disables the high-resolution mode.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

106

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Audio Select (A.Sel)

Configures the video signal processing settings.

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made
for one input source.

Video Mode (V.M)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
Direct (Direct)

Disables the video signal processing.

Processing
(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in
“Adjustment” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

Auto (Auto)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

Video Out (V.Out)
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Settings
1 to 6

Settings

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)
Configures the input settings.

Off (Off)

Does not output video.

AV 1–7 (AV1–7),
V-AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Default
USB: V-AUX (V-AUX)
Others: Off (Off)

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Stereo (Stereo)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono)

Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

107

CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Item

Function

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon.

109

Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.

109

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.

109

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.

109

CONFIGURATIONS

Page

➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu)

108

■ Rename/Icon Select

■ Decoder Mode

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Settings
Auto

Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS

Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings

2
3
4

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Off

Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
Disable

Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu)

109

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.68) using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.

5
6

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).

Item

Function

Save

Registers the current settings in the selected scene.

Page
110

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.

111

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon.

111

Reset

Restores the default settings for the selected scene.

112

■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.69).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

110

■ Load

Choices

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Input

Input (p.67), Audio Select (p.107)

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.

HDMI Output

HDMI Output (p.67)

Mode

Sound Program (p.70), Pure Direct Mode (p.126), Enhancer (p.75),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.106)

Sound

Tone Control (p.105), YPAO Volume (p.105), Adaptive DRC (p.105),
Extra Bass (p.106)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.126), Dialogue Lift (p.106), Dialogue Level
(p.106), Subwoofer Trim (p.106), Extended Surround (p.126)

Video

Video Mode (p.127), Video Adjustment (p.107)

Volume

Master Volume (p.67)

Lipsync

Lipsync (p.125), Delay (p.125)

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern (p.120), PEQ Select (p.123)

Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Off

Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.

Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

■ Rename/Icon Select
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.164).

Detail
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the
settings currently assigned to the selected scene.

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio
with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)
and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Check or uncheck

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

111

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (Sound Program menu)
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).

Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.68) for the selected scene.

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)

112

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Sound Program menu items
• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround
decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs
Item

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

5
6

Function

Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be
used in combination with the
selected sound program.

bPro Logic*,
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie),
bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII Game*),
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)

DSP Level

-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and presence sound
field generation.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and surround sound
field generation.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Surround Back Initial
Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and surround back
sound field generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the presence sound field.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the surround sound field.

Surround Back Room
Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence
sound field.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround
sound field.

Surround Back
Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround
back sound field.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it.

0 to 10
Higher to enhance the reflectivity,
and lower to reduce it.

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)

113

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo”.

Item

Function

Settings

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and reverberant
sound generation.

0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Adjusts the volume of the
reverberant sound.

0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.

Reverb Level

Sound program

2ch Stereo

Item

Function

Settings

Direct

Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.

Auto, Off

Level

Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.

-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.

-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.

0 to 5 to 10
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables
monaural sound output.

Off, On

9ch Stereo

• Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)

114

■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type

bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)

Neo:6 Music

Item

Function

Settings

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.

Off, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.

0 to 3 to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.

-3 to 0 to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.

Center Image

Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.

0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)

115

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5
6

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

116

Setup menu items
Menu

Item

Function

Auto Setup

Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).

Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

120

Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

120

Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

120

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

121

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

121

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.

121

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.

121

Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

122

Rear Presence

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

122

Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.

122

Layout

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers.

122

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.

123

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

123

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

123

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output.

124

Speaker

Configuration
Manual Setup

Page

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

117

Item

Video

HDMI

Network

Page

Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

125

Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

125

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.

125

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.

125

Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

125

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.

126

Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.

126

Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

126

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

126

Extended Surround

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used.

126

VPS
(RX-V3077 only)

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.

126

Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).

127

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).

128

Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

129

Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.

129

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

130

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

130

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.

130

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

131

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

131

Lipsync

Sound

Function

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

118

Item

Function

Page

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

132

Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

132

Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone.

132

Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

132

Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

133

Zone Scene Rename

Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

133

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

133

Zone Scene Rename

Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

133

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

133

Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used.

133

HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

134

Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone.

134

Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.

134

Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

135

Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.

135

Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

135

Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

135

Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

136

Power Mode

Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack.

136

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

136

Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

137

ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).

137

Select an on-screen menu language.

138

Main Zone Set

Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set

Multi Zone

Zone4 Set

Display Set

Function
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
DC OUT

ECO

Language

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

119

Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.

■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
Pattern1 > 2

Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1

Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to
2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power
amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.
Settings

■ Setting Pattern

Basic

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to
9-channel plus rear presence speakers) (p.19).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and
Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers (p.30).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks
(default: Zone2).

9ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers in the main zone and
Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.30).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone3).

7ch +2ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone, plus
Zone2 and Zone3 speakers (p.31).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks
(default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

9ch +RP

(RX-V3077 only)
Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus rear presence
channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.27).

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.

9ch +FRONT

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

(RX-V3077 only)
Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.28).

7ch +FP+RP

(RX-V3077 only)
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers, plus front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.28).

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

120

7ch
+FRONT+1ZONE

5ch
+FRONT+2ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone and Zone3 (or
Zone2) speakers (p.29).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone3).
Select this when you use 5-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone, plus Zone2
and Zone3 speakers (p.29).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks
(default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

7ch BI-AMP

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
speakers) (p.26).

7ch BI-AMP
+1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
speakers) in the main zone and Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.26).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone3).

(RX-V3077 only)
7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
speakers), plus front presence and rear presence channel expansion
using an external amplifier (p.27).

■ Configuration

Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings

Surround Back

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

121

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Small x2

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
Settings

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.

Use

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to
“Front”.

Front Presence

None

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and
“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Settings
Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None

Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Layout

Rear Presence

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and
subwoofers.

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

Surround

Settings

Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None

Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.

Settings
Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front
side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.73) works in this case.

• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

122

Front Presence
Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
Front Height

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the
front side wall.

Overhead

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.

■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.

Rear Presence
Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
Rear Height

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the
rear side wall.

Overhead

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.

■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to
“None”.

Subwoofer

Settings
Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.

YPAO:Natural

Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through

Does not use the equalizer.

Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
Settings
Left + Right

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right
sides of the room.

Front + Rear

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear
sides of the room.

Monaural x2

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.47). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

123

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

1
2
3

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Off

Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.47) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

124

Sound

Adjustment

Configures the audio output settings.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4
Settings
Disable

Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto/Manual Select

• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic
adjustment and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Maximum

Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard

Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

125

■ Initial Volume

■ Extended Surround

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.

Settings
Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB,
0.5 dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.75).

Settings

Auto

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

bPLIIx Movie

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.

bPLIIx Music

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Off

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit
reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)

Settings

Auto

Video Off

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from
the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with
the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,
the wall paper is displayed.
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround
back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing
back those sources.

Settings
Off

Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³ (RX-V3077) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-V2077)
(p.71). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D functions with
the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).
Settings
Off

Disables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D.

Enables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D.

■ VPS
(RX-V3077 only)
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front
presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence
speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.71).
Settings
Off

Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

• Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set
“VPS” to “Off”.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

126

Video

Aspect

Configures the video output settings.

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through

Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.

■ Video Mode

Adjustment

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments).

Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You
can register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).

Settings

■ Setup procedure

Direct

Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.

1
2

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.

3
4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.

Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through

Does not convert the resolution.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0 to 50

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.142) in
the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

127

Edge Enhancement

HDMI

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0 to 50

Configures the HDMI settings.

Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Saturation
Adjusts the video saturation.

■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.164).
Settings

Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Off

Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.164) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.

TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–4
Default
AUDIO 1

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

128

ARC

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Enables/disables ARC (p.165) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings
Off

Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

Settings
Off

Disables the audio output from the TV.

Enables the audio output from the TV.

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

Standby Sync

■ Standby Through

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby
mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Settings
Off

Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.134) is set to “Main”.

Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected
to the unit.
Settings
Off

Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

129

■ Manual network settings

Network
Configures the network settings.

■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with
a commercially-available network cable (p.43)

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.60).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the
unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device
to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.65).

■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

1
2

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

IP Address

Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask

Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P)

Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S)

Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.

4
5
6
7

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
Off

Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

130

■ MAC Address Filter

■ Network Name

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.

Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
Off

Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.

■ Procedure

1
2

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

• AirPlay (p.92) and DMC (p.109) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.

4
5
6

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

131

Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.

Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
the volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Settings
Fixed

Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.

• This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.120).

Zone Rename

Max Volume

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

■ Procedure

1
2

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

132

Mono

Zone Rename

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.

Settings
Off

Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or
TV screen.
■ Procedure

1
2
3

Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.132).

■ Zone4 Set
Configures the Zone4 settings.

Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the scene names in the same manner as “Zone Scene Rename”
in “Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set” (p.133).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Zone Rename

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.132).

■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and
VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main, Zone2, Zone3

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

133

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

Settings
Main, Zone2, Zone4

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.163).

Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
On

Enables the audio output.

Off

Disables the audio output (video output only).

■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.99) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
Settings
Disable

Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

134

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

Trigger Mode

■ Display Set

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Settings

Dimmer (Front Display)

Power

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source”.

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.137) is set to “On”.

Short Message

Source

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,
switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Settings

Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off

Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Settings
Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.

Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings

Manual

Picture 1, Picture 2,
Picture 3

Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function
of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

135

Target Zone

■ Memory Guard

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings

Settings

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

Zone3

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.

Zone4

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.

All

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.

Off

Does not protect the settings.

Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Icon

■ DC OUT
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.

Power Mode
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC
OUT jack.
Settings
Continuous

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.

Main Zone Power
Sync.

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is
turned on.
(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

136

ECO

■ ECO Mode

Configures the power supply settings.

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
Off

Disables the eco mode.

Enables the eco mode.

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Settings
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit
and no input signals are detected (or the unit is muted) for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

137

Language
Select an on-screen menu language.

Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Settings
English

English

日本語

Japanese

Français

French

Deutsch

German

Español

Spanish
Russian

Italiano

Italian
Chinese

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu)

138

■ Network

Types of information

Displays the network information on the unit.

■ Audio Signal

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

Displays information about the current audio signal.
Format

Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Input

IP Address

IP address

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

Default Gateway

The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P)

The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S)

The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC address
Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.131)

Sampling

The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

MAC Address

Bitrate

The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Network Name

The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Wired/Wireless

The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network

Dialogue
Output

The speaker terminals from which signals are output

(When using Wireless Direct)
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.

SSID

The SSID of the wireless network

Security

Security method

Security Key

Security key

IP Address

IP address
Subnet mask

HDMI Signal

Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

Subnet Mask

HDMI Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

MAC Address

MAC address

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)

Network Connection

“Wireless Direct” indication

Analog Resolution

■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Interface

TV interface

Video Resolution

Resolutions supported by the TV

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu)

139

■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
Remote ID

The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.141)

Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

TV Format

The unit’s video signal type (p.141)

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Speaker Impedance

The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.141)

System ID

System ID number

Firmware Version

The version of firmware installed on the unit

1
2

Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.147).

■ Multi Zone
PROGRAM

Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Input

The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Volume

The volume for Zone2 or Zone3

3
4
5

Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.

The new settings take effect.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)

140

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)

• Default settings are underlined.

Item

SPIMP.-

Function

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

Page

HD 3

SPEAKER IMP.

Changes the speaker impedance setting.

141

REMOTE SENSOR

Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.

141

REMOTE CON AMP

Selects the unit’s remote control ID.

141

TV FORMAT

Switches the video signal type.

141

MONITOR CHECK

Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.

142

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.

142

INITIALIZE

Restores the default settings.

142

FIRM UPDATE

Updates the firmware.

143

VERSION

Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

143

HD 3

SPEAKERIMP.
8MIN

Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF

Turns off the remote control sensor.

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
SPIMP.-

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8  MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Settings
ID1, ID2

PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Settings

REMOTECONAMP
ID1

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.

PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Settings

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
SPIMP.-

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

HD 3

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

REMOTESENSOR
ON

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for
3 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for
3 seconds.

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
SPIMP.-

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

TVFORMAT
NTSC

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)

141

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
SPIMP.-

SPIMP.-

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

MONITORCHECK
YES

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.127) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
Choices
BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).

Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
SPIMP.-

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

INITIALIZE
CANCEL

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
VIDEO

Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL

Does not perform an initialization.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)

142

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
SPIMP.-

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

FIRMUPDATE
USB

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
USB

Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK

Update the firmware via the network.

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.147).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
SPIMP.-

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP

HD 3

VERSION
x.xx

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.140) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)

143

SOURCE

Controlling external devices with the remote control
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.

3
4

Press TV z.
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE
blinks twice.

• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

■ TV operations
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.

Registering the remote control code for a TV
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.

TV operation keys

INPUT

Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE

Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL

Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH

Switch the channels of the TV.

TV z

Turns on/off the TV.

Numeric keys

TV operation keys
TV z

CODE SET

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.145). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control

144

SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER

Input selection keys

Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in
orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER
and the external device after pressing SOURCE.

SOURCE z

Turns on/off the playback device.
Cursor keys

External device
operation keys

Menu operation keys

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.

■ Playback device operations

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

Menu operation
keys

Select an item.

ENTER

Confirms a selected item.

RETURN

Returns to the previous screen.

Displays the top menu.

DISPLAY

Switches information on the display.

DISPLAY

SOURCE blinks twice.

TOP MENU

External device
operation keys

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.

POP-UP/MENU

Displays the pop-up menu.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected
song/video.

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

CODE SET

External device
operation keys

Press the input selection key.
For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.

Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys

Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys

Control the TV (p.144).

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.69).

CONFIGURATIONS

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control

145

Resetting remote control codes
SOURCE
RECEIVER

Input selection keys

You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.

Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

2
3

Press the input selection key.
Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
To reset the remote control to factory default settings
a Press CODE SET.
b Press RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
Numeric keys

CODE SET

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control

146

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.143).

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.140). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

Cursor keys
ENTER

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.143).

Information
icon

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Message
System Icon

1
2

Read the on-screen description.
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

147

APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.47). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.120).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.125). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 or Zone3 (p.132).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.126). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.132).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.135) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.136).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.141).

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.107).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.164). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

APPENDIX

➤ Frequently asked questions

148

Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.

The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.23).

The sleep timer worked.

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.137).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.141).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.23).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of
the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.137).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

149

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The unit is out of the operating range.

Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.141).

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights
up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.144). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to
V-AUX.

Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.146).

The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable.

Directly operate the mobile device itself.

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.

External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.

The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be
controlled using the remote control.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

150

Audio
Problem

No sound.

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.139).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The maximum volume is set.

Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.125).

The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.139).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.124).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.47) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.121).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.47) or use “Livello” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.123).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Setup” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.126).

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.124).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.47) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”
menu to “Use” (p.122).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

151

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.129).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.35).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.128).

(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.129). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the
unit with HDMI).

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is
disabled.

Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.134).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.139). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.137).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or
Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.96).

No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).

Noise/hum is heard.

The sound is distorted.

The sound is interrupted.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

152

Video
Problem

No video.

No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected on the unit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.142).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.139). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.166).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.35).

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.67).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.96).

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The video is interrupted.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

153

FM/AM radio
Problem

Cause

Remedy

There is multi-path interference.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.107).

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Select the station manually (p.76).

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
The AM radio signal is weak.

Select the station manually (p.76).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.77).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

154

USB and network
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.130). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.130).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off.

Turn on the wireless router.

The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.

Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.

Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.86).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.131).

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.86).

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).

Wireless network is not found.

The unit does not detect the PC.

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

155

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.131).

It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.

Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.143).

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

Firmware update via the network is failed.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

156

Error indications on the front display
Message

Cause

Remedy

Access denied

Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.86).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod.

Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.

Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.80).
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.43).
Check SP Wires

The speaker cables short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

MHL Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile
device.

Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.

No content

There are no playable files in the selected folder.

Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

The unit cannot detect the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod.

Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.141).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.141).

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.86). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.

No device

Unable to play

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

APPENDIX ➤

Error indications on the front display

157

Glossary
Audio information

DTS-ES

■ Audio decoding format

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.

Dolby Digital

DTS Express

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

DTS Neo:6

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

Dolby TrueHD

FLAC

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

Dolby Pro Logic II

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary

158

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.

WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission
that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL
complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary

159

Network information

Yamaha technologies

SSID

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.

Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.

CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

CINEMA DSP HD³
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.

SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in
your room.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary

160

Supported devices and file formats
■ Supported devices

About HTC Connect

This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy all music content from
your HTC Connect certified smartphone.

❑ USB devices

1. HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on
interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect program with the HTC Connect
compatible smartphones.

• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

2. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3, AAC, WMA and WAV encoding formats. Other
formats may not be compatible.

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.

3. High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.

❑ iPod
Made for.

iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPad (4th generation), iPad mini, iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad
(as of May 2014)

4. Music navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC
Connect.

Please check HTC website for up to date information about features, compatible
devices and audio format support: http://www.htc-connect.com/certified-devices

■ File formats
❑ USB
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC,
FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files.

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of May 2014)

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

❑ PC/NAS
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC,
FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files.
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats

161

Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

Video device

The unit

HDMI out

TV
Resolution

480i/
576i

480p/
576p

720p

1080i

1080p

480i/576i

720p

1080i

1080p/
50, 60 Hz

480p/576p

HDMI in

HDMI out

HDMI

HDMI in

1080p/24 Hz

COMPONENT
VIDEO in

COMPONENT
VIDEO out

COMPONENT
VIDEO

COMPONENT
720p
VIDEO in

1080i

480i/576i
COMPONENT
VIDEO

480p/576p

VIDEO

480p/
576p

720p

1080i

1080p

480i/
576i

m
m
m
m
m

1080p
VIDEO in
VIDEO

480i/
576i

COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO
out

COMPONENT VIDEO out

VIDEO out
VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO in

480i/576i

m
m: Available

APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats

162

Multi-zone output
■ Audio output

■ Video output

Using the unit's
internal amplifier (p.32)
Out
In
Digital audio (HDMI)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks
Zone2

Zone3

m (*3)

Using an external amplifier (p.95)
Out
ZONE OUT jacks
Zone2

Zone3

m (*3)

m (*6)

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
m (*4)

m (*6)

m (*5)

Composite video
m

USB (including iPod)

Network sources

COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO

Zone2/3

HDMI video
Component video

m (*6)

Analog audio
(AUDIO)

TUNER

Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks
(*6)

On-screen display
(browse/playback)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*7)

Zone2

Zone4

m
m
m
m: Available

*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”
*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”

m
m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the
main zone is selected)
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input

APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats

163

(Example)

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.35) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.38).

Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device

Playback starts

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.

(Example)
HDMI Control

HDMI Control

Playback device
also turns off

1
2

ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER

The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn off the TV

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.68)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.145)

APPENDIX

➤ Information on HDMI

164

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

1
2
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.

5
6
7

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.35).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check the followings.

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.128) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.69), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

APPENDIX

➤ Information on HDMI

165

HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal type

Audio signal format

Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM

2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM

8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD

DSD

2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit

SACD

Bitstream

Dolby Digital, DTS

DVD-Video

Bitstream
(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express

Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA

• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz

• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz

• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz

• 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

APPENDIX

➤ Information on HDMI

166

Reference diagram (rear panel)

(RX-V3077)

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

APPENDIX

➤ Reference diagram (rear panel)

167

Trademarks
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS
and Thomson.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195;
7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of
DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This receiver supports network connections.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.

Ubiquitous WPS2.0
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that
an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically
to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad
may affect wireless performance.

x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect Logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of HTC Corporation.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari
are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

APPENDIX

➤ Trademarks

168

Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)

[RX-V2077]

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

SURROUND BACK L/R)
- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)

MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)

• Digital Audio

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

Optical x 1 (AV OUT)

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

• Video

• Audio Format
- Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio

Optical x 3 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1)

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)

- Composite x 1

- DTS Express

- Component x 1

- DTS

AV OUT

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

- Composite x 1

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Video
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
Component x 3 (AV 1–3)

• HDMI Output

• HDMI Input

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*5)

HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)

*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)

* V-AUX: MHL input compatible

Other jacks

• Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R , EXTRA SP 2

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

HDMI

- Subwoofer Out x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)
[RX-V3077]
- Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R*3, R.PRESENCE L/R*4)
*3 Note: barter to ZONE2
*4 Note: barter to ZONE3

- 480p/60 Hz

• RS-232C x 1

*1 Note: Assignment is possible

[ZONE2, ZONE3, R.PRESENCE]

- 576i/50 Hz

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• DC OUT x 1

[ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA

L/R*2)

*2 Note: Assignment is possible

MHL

• REMOTE IN x 2

- Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND
*1

• Link Function: CEC supported

• YPAO MIC x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 2

• Analog Audio

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

• Audio Format
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A

- VGA

TUNER

- 480i/60 Hz

• Analog Tuner

- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications

169

Network

Audio Section

• PC Client Function

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported

[RX-V3077]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )
Front L/R .......................................................... 150 W+150 W

• Internet Radio

Center...........................................................................150 W

• HTC Connect supported

Surround L/R ................................................... 150 W+150 W

• WiFi function
- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK
(AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
- Radio Frequency: 2.4GHz
- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 150 W+150 W
Front Presence L/R.......................................... 150 W+150 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R .......................................................... 165 W+165 W
Center...........................................................................165 W
Surround L/R ................................................... 165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R .......................................... 165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R.......................................... 165 W+165 W

Compatible Decoding Formats

[RX-V2077]

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-V3077]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R.................................................................. 185 W/ch
Center ..................................................................... 185 W/ch
Surround L/R ........................................................... 185 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .................................................. 185 W/ch
Front Presence L/R.................................................. 185 W/ch
[RX-V2077]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R.................................................................. 175 W/ch
Center ..................................................................... 175 W/ch
Surround L/R ........................................................... 175 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .................................................. 175 W/ch
Front Presence L/R.................................................. 175 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

Front L/R .......................................................... 140 W+140 W

[China model]

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

Center...........................................................................140 W

[RX-V3077]

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

Surround L/R ................................................... 140 W+140 W

Front L/R.................................................................. 230 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 140 W+140 W

Center ..................................................................... 230 W/ch

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 140 W+140 W

Surround L/R ........................................................... 230 W/ch

- DTS Digital Surround

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Surround Back L/R .................................................. 230 W/ch

• Decoding Format

DTS Express

• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Front L/R .......................................................... 155 W+155 W
Center...........................................................................155 W

Front Presence L/R.................................................. 230 W/ch
[RX-V2077]

Surround L/R ................................................... 155 W+155 W

Front L/R.................................................................. 220 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 155 W+155 W

Center ..................................................................... 220 W/ch

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 155 W+155 W

Surround L/R ........................................................... 220 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .................................................. 220 W/ch
Front Presence L/R.................................................. 220 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[RX-V3077]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )................................ 175/220/295/410 W
[RX-V2077]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )................................ 165/210/285/405 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 ..............................................150 or more

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications

170

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).......................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal

• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut......................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo.............................................................0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD)............................... 60 mV or more

Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

AM section

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more

Treble Turnover...........................................................3.5 kHz

• Tuning Range...........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz

• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
HEADPHONE OUT .............................................150 mV/100 Ω
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ........................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE OUT.............................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ............................... +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz)..........................................0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion

Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

General
• Power Supply

Treble Boost/Cut ........................... ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz

Treble Turnover...........................................................3.5 kHz

[Australia model]............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz

• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

• Power Consumption........................................................ 490 W
• Standby Power Consumption

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off .......................... 0.1 W

................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals) ..... 2.5 W

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.

Network Standby On

Video Section
• Video Signal Type............................................................... PAL

Wired ............................................................................. 3.1 W
Wi-Fi .............................................................................. 3.8 W
Wireless Direct .............................................................. 3.7 W

PHONO to AV OUT ..............................................0.02% or less

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ..................... NTSC/PAL

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),

MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 Ω)

• Video Signal Level

Network Standby On (Wireless Direct) ............................ 5.7 W

.............................................................................0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)

Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

PHONO...............................................................95 dB or more

Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

AUDIO2 etc. ....................................................110 dB or more

• Video Maximum Input Level ...........................1.5 Vp-p or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out........................................................150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO.................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO2 etc. ........................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control
Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

• Signal to Noise Ratio .......................................... 60 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

• Dimensions (W x H x D)
......................435 x 182 x 465 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 18-1/4”)
* Including legs and protrusions

• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna)
......................435 x 242 x 472 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
• Weight
[RX-V3077]
[China model] ............................................ 19.3 kg (42.5 lbs)
[Australia model]........................................ 17.8 kg (39.2 lbs)
[RX-V2077].................................................... 16.7 kg (36.8 lbs)

FM Section
• Tuning Range .................................. 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ..........................................................71 dB/70 dB

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications

171

Index
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!)
Lock icon (o) 136

140, 147

9ch +RP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu)
9ch +RP (speaker configuration) 27
9ch Stereo (sound program) 73

120

Automatic speaker setting optimization 47
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 79
AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 137

Numerics

16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 127
2.1-channel system 21
2ch Stereo (sound program) 73
3.1-channel system 21
4K Ultra HD 166
5.1-channel system 21
5ch +FRONT+2ZONE
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 121
5ch +FRONT+2ZONE (speaker configuration) 29
7.1-channel system 20
7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 120
7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 30
7ch +2ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 120
7ch +2ZONE (speaker configuration) 31
7ch +FP+RP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 120
7ch +FP+RP (speaker configuration) 28
7ch +FRONT+1ZONE
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 121
7ch +FRONT+1ZONE (speaker configuration) 29
7ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 121
7ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 26
7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 121
7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 26
7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 121
7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (speaker configuration) 27
9.2+2-channel system 19
9.2-channel system 19, 20
9ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 120
9ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 30
9ch +FRONT (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 120
9ch +FRONT (speaker configuration) 28

A.DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 105
A.Sel (Input Settings, Option menu) 107
Access denied (error indication) 157
Access error (error indication) 157
Access Point Scan (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 63
Action Game (sound program) 72
Adaptive DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 105
Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 126
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 125
Adjustment (Video Mode, Setup menu) 127
ADVANCED SETUP menu 140
Advanced speaker configuration 24
Adventure (sound program) 71
AirPlay 92
AM radio listening 76
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 129
Angle (Horizontal) (YPAO measurement result) 56
Angle/height measurement (YPAO) 50, 54
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 165
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 129
Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 127
Audio Decoder (front display information) 103
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 161
Audio file format (USB storage device) 161
Audio Output (HDMI OUT2 Assign, Setup menu) 134
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 129
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 165
Audio Select (Input Settings, Option menu) 107
Audio Signal (Information menu) 139
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 137
Auto Preset (FM radio) 79
Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 47
Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 125

Backup/recovery of the settings 142
Banana plug 23
Basic playback operation 67
Basic speaker configuration 19
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 105
Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 139
Bitstream 166
Bookmark Off (Internet radio, Option menu) 91
Bookmark On (Internet radio, Option menu) 91
Brightness (Video Mode, Setup menu) 128

C
Cellar Club (sound program) 73
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 121
Center Image (Sound Program menu) 115
Center Width (Sound Program menu) 115
Chamber (sound program) 72
Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 139
Check SP Wires (error indication) 157
Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 57
Church in Freiburg (sound program) 72
Church in Royaumont (sound program) 72
CINEMA DSP 8, 71
CINEMA DSP 3D 8, 71
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 126
CINEMA DSP HD³ 8, 71
CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 72
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 79
Compressed Music Enhancer 75
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 121
Contrast (Video Mode, Setup menu) 128
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 47

APPENDIX

➤ Index

172

D
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 136
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 113
Decoder Mode (Input menu) 109
Decoder Off (front display information) 103
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 130
Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 139
Default setting restoration 142
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 125
Detail (Load, Scene menu) 111
Detail Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 127
Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 111
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 130
Dialog (Option menu) 106
Dialog Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 106
Dialog Lvl (Dialogue, Option menu) 106
Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 139
Dialogue (Option menu) 106
Dialogue Level (Dialogue, Option menu) 106
Dialogue Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 106
Dialogue normalization level 139
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 109
Dimension (Sound Program menu) 115
Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 135
Direct (Sound Program menu) 114
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 158
Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 135
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 123
Distance (YPAO measurement result) 56
DLNA 86
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 109
DMC Control (Input menu) 109
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 130
DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 139
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 126
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 74
Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) 74
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (surround decoder) 74
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 126

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 126
Drama (sound program) 71
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 158
DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 113
DSP Program (front display information) 103
DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) 74
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 126
Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 125

E
ECO (Setup menu) 137
ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 137
Edge Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 128
Enhancer (Option menu) 106
ENHANCER (sound mode) 75
ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 72
Error indication (front display) 157
EX/ES (Extended Surround, Setup menu) 126
Extended Surround (Sound, Setup menu) 126
External device control (remote control) 144
External power amplifier 33
Extra Bass (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 106

F
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 131
FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 143
Firmware update 143
Firmware update (network) 143
Firmware update (USB) 143
Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 140
Firmware version check 143
FM Mode (Option menu) 107
FM radio listening 76
FM/AM radio tuning 76
Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 139
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 76
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 121
Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 114
Front 5.1-channel system 21
Front display (part names and functions) 13
Front display brightness 135

Front display information 103
Front panel (part names and functions)
Front panel door (front panel) 11
Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu)
Function (Setup menu) 134

11
122

G
Ground lead

H
Hall in Amsterdam (sound program) 72
Hall in Munich (sound program) 72
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 72
HDMI (Setup menu) 128
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 128
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 139
HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 129
HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 129
HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 134
HDMI output selection 67
HDMI signal compatibility 166
Headphones 73
Height (YPAO measurement result) 56
Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 114
High definition audio 166
Hi-Res Mode (Enhancer, Option menu) 106
HiRes Mode (Enhancer, Option menu) 106
HTC Connect 161

I
In.Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 107
Indicator (part names and functions) 13
Information display (front display) 13
Information menu 138
Information switching (front display) 103
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 113
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 126
Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 132
Initial Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 132
INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 142
Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 139

APPENDIX

➤ Index

173

Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 134
Input jack assignment 134
Input menu 108
Input Settings (Option menu) 107
Input Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 107
Internal Error (error indication) 157
Internal Error (YPAO error message) 57
Internet radio listening 89
IP Address (Network, Information menu) 139
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 130
iPod charge 80
iPod content playback 80
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 92
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 92

L
Language (Setup menu) 138
Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 122
Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 114
Level (Sound Program menu) 114
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 123
Level (YPAO measurement result) 56
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 58
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 159
Lipsync 159
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 125
LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 73
Liveness (Sound Program menu) 113
Load (Scene menu) 111
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 159

M
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 131
MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 139
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 131
Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 132
Manual Setting (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 63
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 120
Manual speaker configuration 120
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 77
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 125

Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 132
Max Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 132
Measurement result (YPAO) 55
Media sharing setup 86
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 136
Menu language selection 46
MHL Overloaded (error indication) 157
MHL-compatible mobile device 41
Microphone base 50, 54
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 114
Monitor check 142
MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 142
Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 133
Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 133
Mono (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 133
Mono Movie (sound program) 71
MOVIE (sound program category) 71
MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 71
Multi measurement (YPAO) 53
Multi Zone (Information menu) 140
Multi Zone (Setup menu) 132
Multiple room playback 94
Multi-zone 94
Multi-zone output 163
MUSIC (sound program category) 72
Music Video (sound program) 72
Muting 67

N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) 43
NAS content playback 87
Network (Information menu) 139
Network (Setup menu) 130
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 43
Network Connection (Network, Information menu) 139
Network Connection (Network, Setup menu) 130
Network information 139
Network Name (Network, Information menu) 139
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 131
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 130

No content (error indication) 157
No device (error indication) 157
No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 57
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 57
No MIC (YPAO error message) 57
No R.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 57
No Signal (YPAO error message) 57
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 57
Noisy (YPAO error message) 57
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu)

141

O
Option menu 104
Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 58
Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 139
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 58

P
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 141
Panorama (Sound Program menu) 115
Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 123
Party mode 99
Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 134
PC content playback 87
PIN Code (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 64
Playback device operation (remote control) 145
Please wait (error indication) 157
Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 120
Power management 137
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 136
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 77
Pure Direct 75
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 75
Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 126

Q
Q factor

124

R
Rear panel (part names and functions)
Rear Presence (Speaker, Setup menu)
Recital/Opera (sound program) 72

APPENDIX

14
122

➤ Index

174

RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 142
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 157
REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 141
Remote control (part names and functions) 16
Remote control code registration
(playback device) 145
Remote control code registration (TV) 144
Remote Control Code Search 144, 145
Remote control ID setting 141
Remote control sensor setting 141
Remote ID (System, Information menu) 140
Remote Off (error indication) 157
REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 141
Rename (input name) 109
Rename (network name) 131
Rename (scene name) 111
Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 109
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 111
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 82
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 88
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 85
Reset (remote control) 146
Reset (Scene menu) 112
Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 127
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 114
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 114
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 114
Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 56
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 72
Room Size (Sound Program menu) 113

S
Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 139
Saturation (Video Mode, Setup menu) 128
Save (Scene menu) 110
SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 57
Scene configuration 69
SCENE function 68
SCENE link playback 69
Scene menu 110

Sci-Fi (sound program) 71
Security (Network, Information menu) 139
Security Key (Network, Information menu) 139
Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 120
Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 120
Setup menu 116
Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)
(Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 60
Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 135
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 82
Shuffle (PC/NAS, Option menu) 88
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 85
Signal information 139
SILENT CINEMA 73
Simple play (iPod) 82
Single measurement (YPAO) 50
Size (YPAO measurement result) 56
Sleep timer 16
Sleep timer (Zone2/Zone3/Zone4) 99
Sound (Setup menu) 125
Sound field effect 71
Sound mode selection 70
Sound program 71, 72
Sound Program menu 112
Speaker (Setup menu) 120
SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 141
Speaker impedance 18
Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 140
Speaker impedance setting 22, 141
Speaker placement 19
Spectacle (sound program) 71
Sports (sound program) 72
SSID 160
SSID (Network, Information menu) 139
Standard (sound program) 71
Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 129
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 129
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 77
STEREO (sound program subcategory) 73
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 74

Straight decode 74
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 130
Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 139
Subwoofer 1 (Speaker, Setup menu) 122
Subwoofer 2 (Speaker, Setup menu) 122
Subwoofer Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 106
Subwoofer/Bass (Option menu) 106
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 74
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 121
Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 121
Surround Back Initial Delay
(Sound Program menu) 113
Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 113
Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 113
Surround decoder 74
Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 113
Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 113
Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 113
SW.Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 106
System (Information menu) 140
System ID (System, Information menu) 140

T
Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 136
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 124
The Bottom Line (sound program) 73
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 73
Tone Control (Option menu) 105
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 105
Trigger function 45
Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 135
Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 135
Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 135
TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 128
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 141
TV Format (System, Information menu) 140
TV operation (remote control) 144

U
Unable to play (error indication) 157
USB Overloaded (error indication) 157

APPENDIX

➤ Index

175

USB storage device content playback 83
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 57

V
V.M (Video Processing, Option menu) 107
V.Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 107
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 143
Version error (error indication) 157
Video (Setup menu) 127
Video Adjust (Video Processing, Option menu) 107
Video Adjustment
(Video Processing, Option menu) 107
Video Mode (Video Processing, Option menu) 107
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 127
Video Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 107
Video Process. (Option menu) 107
Video Processing (Option menu) 107
Video Signal (Information menu) 139
Video signal flow 162
Video signal type setting 141
Village Vanguard (sound program) 73
Virtual CINEMA DSP 73
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 73
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 20, 21
Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 132
Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 132
Volume Interlock (Input menu) 109
VPS (Sound, Setup menu) 126
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 20, 21

Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 56
WPS 160
WPS Button (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu)
WPS button configuration 61

Y
Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer
(YPAO) 47
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 47
YPAO error message 57
YPAO microphone 47
YPAO Vol. (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 105
YPAO Volume (Option menu) 105
YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 105
YPAO warning message 58

Z
Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 132
Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 133
Zone Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 133
Zone Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 133
Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 133
Zone Scene Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 133
Zone Scene Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 133
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 132
Zone3 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 132
Zone4 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 133

W
Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 135
Warehouse Loft (sound program) 73
Web control 100
Wi-Fi 160
Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 130
Wired/Wireless (Network, Information menu) 139
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
(Network Connection, Setup menu) 60, 130
Wireless Direct
(Network Connection, Setup menu) 65, 130

APPENDIX

➤ Index

176

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 
Description                     : 
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : 
Keywords                        : 
Modify Date                     : 2014:06:12 14:44:36+09:00
Create Date                     : 2014:06:12 14:44:36+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2014:06:12 14:44:36+09:00
Document ID                     : uuid:fcb019b4-cb4c-421d-9cbd-1974dd03f26e
Instance ID                     : uuid:99fb9b12-0644-4e08-b6a5-ade6b32412b7
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 177

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha Owner's Manual Web YG261A0 EN RX V3077 V2077 Om A

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation